2011 Dodge Durango Owner'

2011 Durango
Durango
2011
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11WD01-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
291682.ps 11WD01-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 09/14/2010 07:18:16
2011 Durango
2011
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11WD01-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Durango
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
䡵 Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 8
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a
four-wheel drive vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
read these publications carefully. Following the instrucManual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmisassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
5
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
injury. Drive carefully.
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Rollover Warning Label
1
6
INTRODUCTION
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
8
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile
VIN Location
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of
your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Remote Open Window Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 27
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 29
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
䡵 Liftgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 53
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 57
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 57
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 59
䡵 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 60
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . 61
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 70
13
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 74
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 95
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And NOTE: With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the ElecOperating” for further information.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the
ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
15
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on
the driver’s side should the battery in the vehicle or the
RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for
locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the theft alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding.
Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead)
into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
then pull the key out with your other hand.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the
shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key
to the right slightly, then remove the Key Fob as
described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap
Emergency Key Removal
the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
and stopped, but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
you obtain service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in
this condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob
or ignition module. Only remove the emergency
key for locking and unlocking the doors.
(Continued)
17
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key
Fob in the ignition or Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
position.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed in
ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Replacement Keys
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec- cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
CAUTION!
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unatCAUTION!
tended.
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compat• With Keyless Enter-N-Go, always remember to
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
place the ignition in OFF.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- • This device must accept any interference that may be
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
received, including interference that may cause undeblank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
sired operation.
is one that has never been programmed.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unauthorthe authorized dealer.
ized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks, power liftgate and flipper glass
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both
audio and visual signals, the horn will sound, the headperformed at an authorized dealer.
lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatGeneral Information
edly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15 (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is three minutes, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn
subject to the following conditions:
signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
one should go off in the future, you will need to know • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it. make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the vehicle:
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
rearm itself.
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
To Arm The System
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
Follow these steps to arm the theft alarm:
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for tion).
further information).
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make (RKE) transmitter.
sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of • The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
the following methods:
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further infordoor the alarm will sound.
mation).
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and
exterior lights blink 3 times when you unlock the doors.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
23
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
Key Fob with Four-Button RKE Transmitter
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
To
Unlock
The Doors
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
Press
and
release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
transmitter
once
to
unlock the driver’s door or twice to
RKE transmitters.
unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
25
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your InBefore Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
strument Panel” for further information.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
the driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of the when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Program- (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
mable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable FeaPanel” for further information.
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash To Lock The Doors
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmittransmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
feature. The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lamps will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
Remote Open Window Feature — If Equipped
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door (24 km/h) or greater.
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
and horn will remain on.
lower completely.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
27
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
performed at an authorized dealer.
hand.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Emergency Key Removal
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Separating RKE Transmitter
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
following conditions:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• This device must accept any interference received,
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
including interference that may cause undesired
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveoperation.
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly apapproximately
300 ft (91 m).
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
All of the following conditions must be met before the
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
engine will remote start:
• Ignition in Off state for Keyless Enter-N-Go vehicle
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
WARNING!
• Hood closed
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
on the RKE transmitter twice within five secvehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premaonds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
turely:
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted - Liftgate Ajar
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless EnterVehicle
N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
Insert Key and Turn to Run” will display in the EVIC
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
until you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
the START button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
33
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the door lock knob to manually lock or unlock the
doors. If the lock knob is down when the door is closed,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel”.
Manual Door Lock Knob
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave unattended children in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
Power Door Lock Switch
Power Door Locks
If
the
lock
knob
is
down when the door is closed, the door
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
will
lock.
Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
the vehicle before closing the door.
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in
the ignition switch and the driver’s door is open, the
doors will not lock.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside Automatic Door Locks Programming —
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door If Equipped
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
disabled as follows:
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically if all of the following • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
conditions are met:
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un2. The transmission is in gear
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. All doors are closed
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
4. The throttle is pressed
following procedure:
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h)
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power switch.
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
transmitter
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four times
ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
to lock the doors.
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic
programming.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
its previous setting.
NOTE:
• If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
• Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
with local laws.
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
37
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
approximately 72 hours, the Passive Entry feature for
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
Entry feature.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower relock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
sponse time.
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• Unlocking the vehicle by RKE transmitter or Keyless
Enter-N-Go and not opening any door will cause the
doors to ⬙re-lock⬙ and arm theft alarm (if equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected outside
the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on
the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Enter The Liftgate
Liftgate Passive Entry Button
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button on the right side of
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button
the chrome accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
below the liftgate glass to lock or unlock the vehicle.
programmed in EVIC, the liftgate will unlock when you
press the button on the liftgate. For further information,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
the outside of the handles.
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACCESSORY position.
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
43
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
and release it when you want the window to stop.
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condiThe power window switches remain active for 10 min- tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
utes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
either front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Window Lockout Button
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
press the Window Lockout button again.
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
45
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
2
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle and lift.
Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger
or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate.
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pulling
up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the
LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Press the LIFTGATE button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open
the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pressing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate. The power liftgate may also be opened and
closed with the overhead console switch.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate
chime will be audible. For further information, refer to
“Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)/
Electronic Vehicle information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
Also, the power liftgate may be closed by pressing the open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
liftgate switch located on the left rear trim, near the be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate opening. Pressing once will close the liftgate only. liftgate trim panel.
This button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
To operate the power liftgate manually in the open
direction, pull the liftgate handle once to initiate power
cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put
liftgate into manual mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
47
button to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, press
the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the
liftgate, and then press it again to close.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
NOTE:
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
manual operation.
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
meets sufficient resistance.
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
below ⫺22°F (⫺30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
rear liftgate close button or overhead console close
liftgate switches.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
detection of an obstruction.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
WARNING!
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
(Continued)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
49
way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired
length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in
a seat — if equipped
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains Please pay close attention to the information in this
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
window
possible.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
wheel
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
CHildren (LATCH).
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
energy during an impact event
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
• All seat belt systems (except the driver) include Autorates of inflation based on the severity and type of
matic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat
collision.
belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
WARNING!
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger You should read the instructions provided with your
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
tion.
shoulder belts properly.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- Front Air Bags room to inflate.
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
51
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in an accident much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
53
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Latch Plate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Latch Plate to Buckle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
55
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in an accident. The belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
57
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
shoulder belt.
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
anchor point.
that fits you best.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
ALR
Center
N/A
ALR
N/A
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Passenger
ALR
ALR
ALR
59
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking anchor point.
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
locking mode.
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
61
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant ReThe folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
latch plate.
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
folded webbing.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compoSeat Belt Pretensioners
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
identified by any markings, only through visual inspecequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
accident. These devices may improve the performance of
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
worn snugly and positioned properly.
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
63
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active a comfortable position.
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking
Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
65
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. This feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened. BeltAlert威 triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle
speed over 5 mph (8 km/h). The reminder sequence lasts
for 96 seconds or until the respective seat belts are
fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt
AHR In Reset Position
Reminder Light remains illuminated until front belts are
NOTE:
fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
BeltAlert威 will chime as a single notification and illumi• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed to
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
the 96 second reminder sequence.
dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt
Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single
dealer or by following these steps:
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first completed the programming.
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
ON/RUN or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does
on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while renot recommend deactivating BeltAlert威.
buckling the seat belt.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
position except ON/RUN or START, buckle the driver’s
seat belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
67
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
while the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an accident.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags, are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
69
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- • Instrument Panel
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
• Knee Impact Bolster
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
the outboard side of the front seats.
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
but they will open during air bag deployment.
(SABIC)
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
authorized dealer immediately.
Air Bag System Components
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
and Seat Track Position Sensors
system components:
• Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Front Passenger
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags may provide
enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the
outboard side of the front seats.
71
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Location
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require side air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
73
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
(Continued) Air Bags.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collirequired for this vehicle.
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or the other hand, depending on the type and location of
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air severe initial deceleration.
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
the severity and type of impact.
type of collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
75
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acciORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
away from an inflating air bag.
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruSTART or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosair bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
77
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about onequarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
78
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front And Side Impact Sensors
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
In front and side impacts, front and side impact sensors
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response
removed.
to certain impact events.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If A Deployment Occurs
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
the communication network remains intact, and the
immediately after deployment.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
ing functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
79
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
81
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
82
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened;
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perlaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or under should ride properly buckled
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
crash investigation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
83
There are different sizes and types of restraints for Infants And Child Restraints
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
child.
carriers and convertible child seats.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than
20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
84
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
WARNING!
• Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
air bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• The second row seating positions are equipped with
automatic locking retractors (ALR). To install child
restraint seats pull the belt from the retractor until
there is enough allowance to pass it through the child
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then,
pull the shoulder belt until it is fully extended from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. For additional
information, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Retractors
Mode⬙ earlier in the Occupant Restraints Section of the
owners’ manual.
85
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who are
older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are older
WARNING!
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
restraint anchorage system. Refer to Lower Anchors and
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
Tether for CHildren (LATCH).
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
86
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltchild to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
the back.
lap/shoulder belt.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend system provides for the installation of the child restraint
over the front of the seat when their back is against the without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
structure.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now availas possible.
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
slouching can move the belt out of position.
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
87
anchors can be are just visible when you lean into the rear
seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them
if you run your finger along the intersection of the
seatback and seat cushion surfaces. The vehicle’s seat belt
must be used for the center position. Regardless of the
specific type of lower attachment, never install LATCHcompatible child seats such that two seats share a comNOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
mon lower anchorage.
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
with, and never leave your child unattended in the position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHvehicle.
compatible, you can only install the child restraints using
The rear outboard seating positions have lower
the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instrucanchorages capable of accommodating LATCHtions, refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child
compatible child seats having flexible,
Restraint System”.
webbing-mounted lower attachments and child
seats with fixed lower attachments. The rear seat lower
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
88
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
Latch Anchorages
In addition, there are top tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
89
2
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
WARNING!
Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load
floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
90
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
First, loosen the child seat child seat adjusters on the
lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors
over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat
cover material. Then, locate the tether anchorage directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint
and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful
to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchor and the child restraint. There are
three top tether anchorages located on the back of the
seat, behind the gap panel. They are not visible until
you fold the gap panel down. Do not use the cargo tie
down hooks located on the floor behind the seat.
Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts
are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if
you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then
allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For additional
information on ALR, refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”
description under “Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions” section. The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a
cinching latch plate.
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
ALR
Center
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
N/A
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Passenger
CRS Lock
ALR
ALR
ALR
91
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
In the rear center seat, you may have trouble tightening
the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
92
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out. If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens
the belt, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the
buckle again. If you still can’t make the child restraint
secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
the upward position. To access the center seat arm rest
tether first lower the arm rest. The tether is located Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat
behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing, then raise the armrest and attach the tether hook
to the strap located on the front of the arm rest.
backing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
93
strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted
floor panel away from the seat back, this will expose the
top tether strap anchorages.
2
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
For center seating position route the tether strap over the
seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat. For the outboard
seating positions, route the tether under the head restraints, and attach the hook to the top tether anchor
located on the back of the seat. To access the top tether
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
94
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Top Tether Strap Mounting
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load
floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child
could be badly injured or killed.
Top Tether Strap Attachment
For the center seating position route the tether strap over
the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the top
tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind
the gap panel. For the outboard seating positions, route
the tether strap under the headrests and attach the hook
to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat
95
behind the gap panel. Please note the top tether anchorages are not visible until you fold the gap panel down.
Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the
floor behind the seats.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
96
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the SAFETY TIPS
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
mental and should be avoided.
AREA.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
WARNING!
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
cause serious injury or death.
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interbelts.
preted as an indication of difficulty.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
97
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
98
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Seat Belts
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
inoperable.
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Airbag Warning Light
WARNING!
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious perauthorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
sonal injury.
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho(Continued)
rized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
99
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
100
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 108
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 110
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 120
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . 122
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
Rearward Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 130 䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 147
▫ Folding Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . 147
▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 149
103
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 158
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Ambient Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . .
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
. . . 160
. . . 162
. . . 163
. . . 164
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . 175
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . 177
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . 179
䡵 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . 182
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . 169
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . 169
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . 188
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 193
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
105
▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . 197 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 199
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 210
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 204
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 214
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Cargo Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Stowing The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window. Headlight
glare can be reduced by moving the small control under
the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the
day position (toward the windshield).
3
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The mirror is twisted on the
windshield button counterclockwise and requires no
tools for mounting.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
109
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Outside Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Power Mirror Switch
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
111
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
Rear Detection Zones
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will NOTE:
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operadetection zones.
tional. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends apbeyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
driver of vehicles in these areas.
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
3
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
115
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Opposing Traffic
Stationary Objects
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
117
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
3
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
Blind Spot Alert
alarms, including radio muting.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
WARNING!
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the radio is muted.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
119
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
system, the radio is also muted.
Uconnect™ Phone is a hands-free system that allows you
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored in
the appropriate visual alert only.
your mobile phone. Press the Uconnect™ Phone button
on the radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped)
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
and
follow the instructions to pair the mobile phone.
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re- Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal Manual located on the DVD for further details.
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Commands can be initiated by pressing the VR
located on the radio or steering wheel
button
controls (if equipped).
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
SEATS
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Power Seats — If Equipped
vehicle.
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
WARNING!
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in and the seatback.
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
backward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when you have reached the desired
position.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING! (Continued)
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas(Continued) senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
123
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of
the seat cushion, near the floor.
125
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
WARNING!
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause serious burns
due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
heated and heated steering wheel seat can be programmed
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
to come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting
System — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
Your Vehicle” for further information.
within two to five minutes.
Front Heated Seats
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
center of the instrument panel (below the climate conthe system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
trols).
maximum of 55 minutes of continuous operation. At that
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
129
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
maximum of 55 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures.
There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the
driver and passenger to operate the seats independently.
The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just
below the climate controls.
The ventilated seat switches are used
to control the speed of the fans located
in the seat. Press the switch once to
choose HIGH, press it a second time to
choose LOW. Pressing the switch a
third time will turn the ventilated seat
OFF. When HIGH speed is selected
both lights on the switch will be illuminated. When LOW
speed is selected one light will be illuminated.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
131
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
133
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
3
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Rear Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
135
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row
head restraints can be folded using a switch, located on
the instrument panels switch bank.
Press the power folding switch located
on the instrument panel to fold the
head restraints.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: The head restraints can only be folded downward using the power folding switch. The head restraints
must be raised manually when occupying the third row.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Rear Seat
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Fold-Flat Second Row Seat
Release Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to behind the seatback.
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
3
Tumble Strap
Release Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
To Raise Rear Seat
Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Tumbled Second Row
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
139
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat pull on the release handle
located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the
pull strap located next to the release handle.
3
Third Row Folded
NOTE: The second row seats must be in their full
upright position, or tumbled when folding the third row
seats.
Release Handles
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap
located on the back of the seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,
driver’s outside mirror, adjustable steering wheel posiDriver Memory Buttons
tion (if equipped), and the radio station preset settings.
Your
vehicle
is
equipped
with two RKE transmitters. One
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also
or
both
RKE
transmitters
can be linked to either memory
be programmed to recall the same positions when the
position.
The
memory
system
can accommodate up to
UNLOCK button is pressed.
four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the
two memory positions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory
141
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered 6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings and remove the key.
for that button and store a new one.
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to driver’s door.
the ON/RUN position.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
9. Press and release the LOCK/OFF button on one of the
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
RKE transmitters.
Step 3.
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview
the ON/RUN position.
mirror to the desired positions.
4. Adjust the power steering column tilt and telescoping
position (if equipped) to the desired positions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter ⬙Yes⬙. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
before continuing to Step 3.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S,
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
one second will occur before another recall can be
Memory Position Recall
selected.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic 1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
remove the key.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
on the driver’s door.
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
vehicle.
button 1 on the driver’s door.
There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
available:
button on the RKE transmitter.
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is
memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
transmitter.
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
• The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
driving position when the key is placed into the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward To open the hood, two latches must be released.
the ACC/ON position.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically dis- panel and in front of the driver’s door.
abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
Exit/Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry/Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Hood Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
145
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
147
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
solution followed by rinsing.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle speFeatures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this
section for further information.
NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is
replaced, the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerNOTE: When your headlights come on during the
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrudaytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically
ment Panel” for further information.
dim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
this section for further information.
position.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
lighting at night by automating high beam control front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
To Deactivate
used for normal nighttime driving.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
Headlight Delay
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal operaTo aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
tion of low beams).
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
reactivate the system.
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
system to function improperly.
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “UnderDaytime Running Lights — If Equipped
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating headlights are required during the day.
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position, or if equipped, when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior
lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Dimmer Control
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on ON.
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
Front Map/Reading Lights
the driver’s door is opened.
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overBattery Saver
head console.
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way
up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
153
Ambient Light
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
3
Ambient Light
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
steering column.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
155
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding the Features
of Your Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
157
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Mist Control
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
159
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate • Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
to activate this feature.
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandtive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driver
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
OFF position when not using the system.
following conditions:
NOTE:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temwhen ice, or dried salt water is present on the windperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
shield.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU- steering column in position, push the lever upward until
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not fully engaged.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
WARNING!
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or drivTILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is steering column is locked before driving your velocated below the steering wheel at the end of the hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
161
steering column lever is located below the multifunction NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
lever on the steering column.
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
WARNING!
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel and seat can be programmed to
come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting
System — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
163
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the steering wheel heater to
overheat.
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic To Set A Desired Speed
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
vehicle set speed.
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
To Activate
operate at the selected speed.
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be button.
turned off when not in use.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
WARNING!
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
You could lose control and have an accident. Always speed memory.
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
165
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to (1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
increase until the button is released, then the new set the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
moderate hills is normal.
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Control.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
WARNING!
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your veNOTE:
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use • If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
167
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
− Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
− Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight
distance conditions.
− Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate
for such changes.
− Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
− Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s
braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle to a
complete stop.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations
(i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section.
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
169
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
DISTANCE SETTING
RES +
SET CANCEL
ON/OFF
MODE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
171
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
3
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
ACC Set
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- To Cancel
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the
speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if:
accelerator pedal.
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• If the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
Driver Override
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off,
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
173
To Resume Speed
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
last set speed.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of
20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. This
could cause a collision and/or serious injury.
• You push the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
display.
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE:
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to dehill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
crease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downEVIC display.
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
3
Distance Setting 2
Distance Setting 3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
175
176
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
Distance Setting 1
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button • The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
setting adjusts between long, medium, and short.
itself.
• The distance setting is changed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
177
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
Brake Alert
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
from the vehicle ahead.
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
178
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the MENU button (located on the steer- ACC SET
ing wheel) repeatedly until one of the follow− When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
ing displays in the EVIC:
The set speed will continue to display in place of the
Menu
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
Button
while ACC is set.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
− When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
− When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Example Only
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
179
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
• Set Speed Change
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
• Distance Setting Change
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
• System Cancel
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
• Driver Override
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
• System Off
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
The EVIC will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Clean Radar Sensor Warning
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
181
• If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterauthorized dealer for service.
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
ACC operation.
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or ACC Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
malfunction.
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
simply reactivating it.
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
NOTE:
• If the “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
182
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable Warning
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
183
Turns And Bends
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
184
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
Lane Changing
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
185
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
186
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
Classification Specifications:
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
47 C.F.R. Part 15
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
47
C.F.R Part 15.515
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change modes, press the MODE button when the
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position.
“Cruise Ready” will be displayed if the system was in
ACC READY or ACC SET position. “Cruise Off” will be
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
187
displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position. To NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, press the changing speed, not the speedometer.
MODE button a second time.
To Vary The Speed Setting
There are two ways to change the set speed:
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-tovehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a
safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
desired speed and press the SET - button.
• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respectively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph
(8 km/h) increments.
To Cancel
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
erasing the memory if:
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the • You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
• You press the CANCEL button.
speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
188
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) warns the driver of a
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and
To Resume
prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from
collision.
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set
speed.
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
To Turn Off
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
memory if:
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
• You push the ON/OFF button.
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
• You turn off the ignition.
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
deactivated.
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
Normal Cruise Control).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
189
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) refer
FCW Message
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
NOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in10 mph (16 km/h).
formation. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will be
displayed in the EVIC.
FCW settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in
PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
Example Only
Example Only
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
191
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
3
FCW Off Example
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
Example Only
NOTE: In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed
in the EVIC.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
192
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the unavailable screens.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
FCW Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable Warning
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
193
ParkSense姞 Sensors
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense姞 Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Prochanged to the ON/RUN position.
grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerposition, the system will remain active until the vehicle
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Inspeed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
strument Panel” for further information.
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
194
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instru- ParkSense姞 Display
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the will turn ON indicating the system status.
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Park Assist ON
Rear Park Assist Display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
195
3
Park Assist OFF
Slow Tone
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
196
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Display Message
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Park Assist ON
Arcs
None
Radio Mute
No
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
Warning Object
Warning Object
Detected
Detected
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled with a switch
located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or
through the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or
197
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
Warning Object
Detected
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Warning Object
Detected
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
When the ParkSense威 switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for
3
198
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
The ParkSense威 switch LED will be ON when Park“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
Sense威 is disabled or defective. The ParkSense威 switch
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
The ParkSense威 system uses four sensors located in the will not operate.
rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
(200 cm) away from the rear bumper fascia. The warning
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and the
display located above in the Instrument Cluster’s EVIC
rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate
dirt or other obstruction, see your authorized dealer.
the range of the object.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
EVIC, see your authorized dealer.
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is malfunctioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
199
Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the instrument
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damas long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
age the sensors.
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
sounding a tone.
NOTE:
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operatbe covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
ing properly.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
bumper.
will display “PARK ASSIST OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
200
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
201
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
202
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView威 camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
203
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off —
With Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
204
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft key and pressing
the “save” soft-key.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
205
Sunglass Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
Sunglass Bin Door
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
206
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink威 channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
207
Programming HomeLink姞
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
208
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away • After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the gakeeping the indicator light in view.
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
System.”
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and handheld transmitter buttons.
and observe the indicator light.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
open and close while you train.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
NOTE:
then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5.
• Some gate operators and garage door openers may
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
209
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
210
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling at this time.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
door or gate motor.
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
Using HomeLink姞
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
211
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow these steps:
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
are some of the most common solutions:
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
release the button.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
Security
to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
212
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
213
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
214
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
Sunshade Operation
forward again.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
Pinch Protect Feature
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the open.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
215
Ignition OFF Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to approximately ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic
Sunroof Maintenance
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
the glass panel.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
216
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
element must be used.
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
need to be replaced.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Imto the battery and powered at all times.
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
NOTE:
covered by your warranty.
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
217
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
3
Front Power Outlet
Center Console Outlet
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
218
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Rear Power Outlet
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Front Console
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
219
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
220
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Power Inverter
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.
221
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed,
there will be a delay of approximately one second before
the inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the
inverter is producing AC power.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
222
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the fold-down center armrest.
located in the center console.
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholder Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
223
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
3
Door Panel Storage
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the
latch and lower the glove box door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
224
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Center Console
The center console contains both an upper and a lower
storage area.
Storage Compartment Latches
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Storage Compartment
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
225
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
3
Lower Storage Compartment
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Press And Release
226
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, Cargo Storage
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
Three-Press Switch
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
227
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
228
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the control lever. The control lever is located
on the left side of the steering column.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
229
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
first detent for intermittent operation and to the OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more will
activate the washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release
of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear
wiper operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF
position, rotating it downward will activate the rear
washer pump which will continue to operate as long as
the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle two
times before returning to the parked position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if window defroster only when the engine is operating.
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
230
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
231
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Deploying the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar.
3
Thumb Screw
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
232
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by sliding
the crossbar towards the center of the roof. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot supports
at each end.
Removing Crossbars
Bending Pivot
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
233
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on it towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure the
the side rail.
crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as far
into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in place,
tighten both thumb screws completely.
3
Positioning Crossbars
Installing Crossbars
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
234
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the Stowing the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
deployment of the crossbars.
screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Deployed Crossbars
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
235
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot sup- Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
ports at each end.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
3
Crossbar Pivot
Stowing Crossbars
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
236
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the
roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Tightening Crossbar
Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
opposite side.
Crossbar to Side Rail
Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
237
CAUTION!
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
3
238
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumbwheels frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 267
䡵 Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 254
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 271
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 283
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 284
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 292
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 293
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 303
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 303
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 308
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
241
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 308 䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 314
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Sirius Backseat TV™) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 315
䡵 Video Entertainment System™
(Sales Code XRV) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 319
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Rear Climate Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 326
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin
9 — ESC Off Switch
10 — Ignition Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
11 — Headlight Switch
12 — Hood Release
13 — Fuel Door Release
14 — Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
243
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
tires.)
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
245
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operailluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using requent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size,
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
monitors engine and automatic transmission conto continue to function properly.
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
WARNING!
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
247
system. If this light remains on after several ignition 5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
trol (ESC) is off.
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
6. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
ON/RUN.
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds is not functioning and that service is required. However,
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop the conventional brake system will continue to operate
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
that caused the ESC activation.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the 10. High Beam Indicator
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steerthe light inspected by an authorized dealer.
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog 11. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Red
Telltale Area
lights are on.
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tell8. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
tales. For further information, refer to “Electronic vehicle
This indicator will illuminate when the park
Information Center (EVIC)”.
lights or headlights are turned on.
12. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display/Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve9. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals hicle has been driven.
when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
chime, and an EVIC message will appear if the turn
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
signals are left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
for a defective outside light bulb.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
249
14. 4 LOW
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display For further information on four-wheel drive operation
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
ter”.
15. Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
13. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) White
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the
Telltale Area
4WD Lock switch is activated and the transThis area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white
mission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic
position (Off-Road Mode).
vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
16. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
250
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
17. Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the Amber Telltale Area
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
caution telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
18. Fuel Gauge
21. Vehicle Security Light
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
19. Airbag Warning Light
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first light will also come on for about three seconds when the
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is ignition is first turned on.
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
22. Brake Warning Light
on while driving, have the system inspected at an authoThis light monitors various brake functions,
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
including brake fluid level and parking brake
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
application. If the brake light turns on it may
Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
251
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 23. TOW/HAUL
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
The TOW HAUL button is located on the
center stack upper switch bank. This light will
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
24. Seat Belt Reminder Light
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apto eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
tion.
25. Temperature Gauge
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaapplied. It does not show the degree of brake application. ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service.
253
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
254
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC consists of the following:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
• System Status
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
instrument cluster.
• Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
255
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Speed, Trip Info, Vehicle Info, Messages, Units, System Setup, Turn Menu Off)
and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and submenus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
256
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BACK Button
• Service Keyless System (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go,
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
Passive Entry - if equipped)
previous menu or sub-menu.
• Service Park Assist System
• Park Assist System Blinded
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Keyfob Battery Low
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Left front turn signal lamp out
the following messages:
• Right front turn signal lamp out
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Left rear turn signal lamp out
• Key Left Vehicle
• Right rear turn signal lamp out
• Key Not Detected
• Service air filter
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• Low Tire Pressure
• Premium TPM System Graphic Display
• Perform service
• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor• ESC System Off
ing System” in “Starting And Operating”)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Service blind spot system
• Blind spot detection unavailable
• Blind spot system off
257
• ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC
system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
equipped).
• Blind spot detection unavailable sensor blocked
• ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
• Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise ConThe Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
trol (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to • Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a
slower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Adaptive Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adap- • Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under- • Distance Set — After changing the desired following
distance in the ACC system, this message will display
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
258
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control • ACC/FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error — If the
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction
Vehicle” (if equipped).
that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
• Brake — If the ACC system predicts that its maximum
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set
distance, this message will flash and a chime will • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor — If the
ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
that requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer
braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immeto “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanddiately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea• Coolant low
tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Oil change due > Dealer Info
• Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle — If the
ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting • Key in ignition
conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
• Lights on
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
• Key in Ignition Lights On
equipped).
• Ignition or Accessory On
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Ignition or Accessory On Lights On
• Memory 1 profile set
• Oil temp high Speed may be limited
• Memory 2 profile set
• Oil temp high Speed limited
• Memory system unavailable — Not in Park
• Turn signal on
• Memory system unavailable — Seatbelt buckled
• Park assist on
• Memory 1 profile recall
• Warning object detected
• Memory 2 profile recall
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Wrong Key
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Damaged Key
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Key not programmed
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Park Assist Disabled
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Automatic high beams on
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
• Automatic high beams off
• Remote start active — Insert Key and Turn to Run
• Service All Wheel Drive System
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
259
4
260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• All Wheel Drive System in neutral
• ECO — Fuel Saver Indicator
EVIC White Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
• Shift Lever Status
Owners Manual
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
• AWD AUTO
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1”
indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has
• LOW RANGE
been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
• SERV AWD
further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”
• For AWD Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
• Electronic Speed Control ON
in N Press 4 Low
This light will turn on when the electronic
• For AWD High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
speed control is ON. For further information,
in N Press 4 Low
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
261
• Electronic Speed Control SET
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
This light will turn on when the electronic
This light warns the driver of a potential collispeed control is SET. For further information,
sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Underdriver to take action in order to avoid the
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
collision. For further information, refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive • Power Steering System Over Temperature —
If Equipped
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steerThis light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
ing maneuvers may have occurred, which
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
caused an over temperature condition in the power
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
262
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will cool and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power monitors the emissions and engine control system. If the
Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further infor- vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light will come
on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on, as
mation.
a bulb check, until the engine is started. If the vehicle is
NOTE:
not ready for emissions testing the light will come on
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operawhen the ignition is first turned on and remain on for
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and remain on until
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come on during
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
starting, have the condition investigated promptly.
and during parking maneuvers.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
service.
for system service.
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tellneed towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
tales. These telltales include:
soon as possible.
• Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
263
• Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
• Loose Gascap Indicator
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
264
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate the windThis light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
shield washer fluid is low.
may be ajar.
• SERV AWD
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
The SERV AWD light monitors the electric shift AWD
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
system. If the SERV AWD light stays on or comes on
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
during driving, it means that the AWD system is not is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
functioning properly and that service is required.
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
on.
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
• Door Ajar
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
• Charging System Light
more doors may be ajar.
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
265
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
require towing.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the • Engine Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
This light warns of an overheated engine condilight will come on when the ignition is first
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apturned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
267
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do
not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
following Fuel Economy Functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
• Distance To Empty
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode —
If Equipped
This feature shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset. To reset the average fuel economy display,
press and release the SELECT button once while average
fuel economy is highlighted. Once reset, the history
Fuel Saver Mode — On
information will be erased, and the averaging will conThis feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System Distance To Empty (DTE)
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner. the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
269
Trip Info
This feature allows you to track the total distance traveled since the last reset and the elapsed time of travel.
Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of • Trip A
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
• Trip B
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
• Elapsed Time
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant Trip Computer functions. The Trip Functions mode disamount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW plays the following information:
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Trip A
Vehicle Speed
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
This feature allows you to monitor your vehicle speed on reset.
the EVIC display, press and release the SELECT button to
change the units of measure between in MPH or km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
270
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
Elapsed Time
available information displays, then press SELECT to
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
display any one of the following choices.
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON • Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
or START position.
To Reset The Display
Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the
resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable
functions, press and hold the SELECT button for two
seconds. Current display will reset along with other
functions.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can
be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the
preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Go
icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the
EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position.
271
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
always re-appears.
Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And OperatAutomatic Compass Calibration
ing” for more information.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
272
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
Compass Variance Map
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
273
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, map. For further information, refer to “Compass Variance.”
then press the SELECT button.
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance” 1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
EVIC.
then press the SELECT button.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
displayed in the EVIC.
5. Press and release the BACK button to exit.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator EVIC.
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
NOTE: For the most accurate compass performance, the indicator turns off. The compass will now function
compass variance must be set before performing the normally.
manual compass calibration. The variance should be set
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
274
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in three
seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
Nav–Turn By Turn
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destinaPress and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
displays in the EVIC.
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
following choices.
deactivated.
Select Language
Auto Unlock Doors
When in this display you may select one of five lanWhen this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
275
feature showing the system has been activated, or the all doors will unlock no matter which passive entry
check-mark is removed showing the system has been equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press
is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
deactivated.
the driver’s door is grasped. With passive entry, if Driver
Remote Unlock Sequence
Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
than once will only result in the driver’s door opening.
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
You have to touch a passenger passive entry equipped
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
door handle to unlock all doors passively when Driver’s
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
Door Only is programmed in the EVIC.
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of RKE Linked To Memory
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE When this feature is selected, you can use your RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high- profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position
lighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the (if equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
setting has been selected.
When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with passive entry and
driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To
the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press,
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
276
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button a check-mark appears next to the feature showing
the system has been activated or the check-mark is
removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer
to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the “Flash
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark apRemote Start Comfort Sys.
pears next to the feature showing the system has been
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
system has been deactivated.
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will Horn With Remote Start
automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
These features will stay on through the duration of occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the feature showing the system has been activated or the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
showing the system has been deactivated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
277
Headlamps With Wipers
(Available with Automatic Headlamps Only)
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
278
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available with Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
279
Display ECO Symbol — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display; this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry)
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go ” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
When this feature is selected, the HSA system is active.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting
And Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
Gauge Glow Rings
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
The gauge glow rings that illuminate the tachometer and
deactivated.
speedometer in the instrument cluster can be turned on
or off. To make your selection, press and release the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
280
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Auto High Beams
(Available With SmartBeam™ Only)
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
windshield. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the system
reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Blind Spot Alert
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert.
By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once, the
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot:
Lights Only” mode. When this mode is selected the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By pressing and
releasing the SELECT button a second time “Blind Spot:
Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this mode the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside
Intermittent Wiper — If Equipped
mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically
on. When “Blind Spot: Off” is selected the Blind Spot
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Forward Collision Warning
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status
of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
most reaction time. To change the setting for more
dynamic driving select the Near setting. This warns you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
when you are much closer. This allows for a more
dynamic driving experience. To change FCW status press
281
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
282
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding The • System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operactive System Warnings)
ating information.
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pressure of all four road tires). For additional information,
Display Units Of Measure In:
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped)
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in “Starting
can be changed between English and Metric units of
And Operating”.
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
System Status
Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
following System Status messages displays in the EVIC:
• System OK
Tire Pressure Display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures” in “Starting And Operating” for additional
information.
283
Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI, Manual located on the DVD for further details.
kPa, or BAR.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
284
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
side of the radio faceplate.
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
Media Center 130 (RES)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
285
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
SCROLL control knob.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
286
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second AM/FM Button
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
mid-range tones.
Memory
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third When you are receiving a station that you wish to
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
treble tones.
this station and press and release that button. If a button
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
the front and rear speakers.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
287
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
pressing the pushbutton twice.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
button number will display.
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Buttons 1 - 6
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
stations).
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
DISC Button
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
MP3 Audio Play
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
288
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
289
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
290
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
291
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
292
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
293
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
ACC position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
Electronic Volume Control
If Equipped
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
volume and to the left decreases it.
details.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
set at the same volume level as last played.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
SEEK Buttons
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next screen.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
294
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob to save time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
screen.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TIME Button
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
and radio frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
Clock Setting Procedure
procedure, starting at Step 2.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
295
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
296
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Top 40
Weather
297
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
AM/FM Button
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SETUP Button
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
be stored into pushbutton memory.
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
298
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
299
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
CAUTION!
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
300
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanTIME Button
dom Play.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW/FF
file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricbegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
tions.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
Supported Media (Disc Types)
works in a similar manner.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
AM/FM Button
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
301
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeLevel 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
character extension)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
character extension)
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of files: 255
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file longer disc loading times.
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to Supported MP3 File Formats
display the file name and folder name and will assign The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extena number instead. With a maximum number of files, sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
not play the file.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
302
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
303
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a time⬙ priority mode.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
before writing to the disc.
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
playable files).
vehicle speakers.
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
304
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the System Activation
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
down.
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welPress this button to change the display to time of day. The
come kit that contains general information, including
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
ignition is OFF).
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
If Equipped
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastElectronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Number (ESN/SID)
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Please have the following information available when
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
calling:
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
limited coverage in Alaska.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
305
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
form of short audio mutes.
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
306
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
ACC position to operate the radio.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
SEEK Buttons
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next to normal display).
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
RW/FF
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
direction of the arrows.
without stopping until you release it.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
307
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
and press and release that button. If a button is not
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butexited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
308
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
button number will display.
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
Buttons 1 - 6
or glove compartment.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
If Equipped
Apple’s website for software updates.
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
309
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
which is located in the center console or glove compartOnce the audio device is connected and synchronized to
ment.
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
310
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
Using This Feature
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
USB port:
Play Mode
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
etc.) information on the radio display.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents. USB device and display data:
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
previous track.
audio device)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
311
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
the current track.
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
holding the FF >> button.
Off⬙.
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 dejump backward or forward respectively, for five
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
seconds.
each track in the current list and then forward to the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
312
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
• Preset 1 – Playlists
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Preset 2 – Artists
313
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
314
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
Uconnect™ phone system.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
Streaming Audio”.
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
Play Mode
music on your cellular phone.
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
315
NOTE: SIRIUS Backseat TV™ service is not available in
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on Hawaii or Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska.
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
Refer to the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
DVD, RER Navigation, RHB Multimedia or RBZ Multimedia User Manuals for detailed operating instructions.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM™
current song that is playing will display info.
(SALES CODE XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Multimedia
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con(SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) — IF EQUIPPED
sists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headtechnology to provide streaming video. The subscription sets. Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. Uconnect™ Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
studio (SIRIUS Backseat TV™) offers three video chan- details.
nels for family entertainment, directly from its satellites
and broadcasting studios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
316
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the
front seats.
Remote Control Location
Lowering the Display Screen
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
317
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a The button located in the center of the left-hand control
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and will tune to the next preset station that you have promode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
318
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
wiping from center to edge.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchThe center button on the left side rocker switch has no
ing the disc.
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
center button will select the next available CD in the or anti-static sprays.
player.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
319
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
select individual comfort settings.
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is • When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode
operation, Auto blower operation is set by using a
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
push button on the control unit and a comfort temnot satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
perature setting by using the temperature up and
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
down buttons.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
320
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior 1. A/C Button
comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode.
2. Recirculation Control Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the left
front seat occupant.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
4. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel,
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
5. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
321
10. Auto Temperature Control Button
6. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the right Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
front seat occupant.
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
7. Front Defrost Button
more information. Performing this function will cause
Press and release to change the current setting, the
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
modes.
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is 11. Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed inselected.
creases as you move the control to the right from the
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
control. Push the button for warmer temperature set12. Climate Control ON/OFF Button
tings.
Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature 13. Mode Control Button
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
322
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. SYNC Button
Automatic Operation
Press and release to control the temperature setting for
1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
both zones from the driver temperature control.
Control (ATC) Panel.
15. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
Provides the driver with independent temperature consystem to maintain by adjusting the driver and front
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
16. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- automatically maintain that comfort level.
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
17. Rear Control Button
Provides the rear seat occupants with independent the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
blower and temperature control. Push the button to function automatically.
activate the rear climate control and allow the rear seat
NOTE:
occupants control of the rear blower and temperature
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
settings.
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
323
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
Use the outer dial control to regulate
the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control clockwise and decreases
when you move the control counterclockwise.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain Blower Control
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
Manual Operation
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
This system offers a full complement of manual override
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
features.
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently Auto mode.
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
temperature control will continue to operate automatiby selecting one of the following positions.
cally.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
324
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Panel Mode
Mix Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side while keeping the windshield clear.
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
Defrost Mode
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
Air comes from the windshield and side window
amount of airflow from these outlets.
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
Bi-Level Mode
temperature settings for best windshield and side winAir comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor dow defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the
blower will automatically default to medium-high unless
outlets and defrost outlets.
the blower is controlled manually.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
Floor Mode
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
325
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the
vehicle.
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Floor/Defrost Mix and
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation.
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
326
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Climate Control — If Equipped
The Rear Climate Control system has floor air outlets,
and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The unit provides warm or cool air through the
floor and upper outlets.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
If the rear system is off, changing the rear setting to a
position other than off will turn the rear system on. If
both the front and rear systems are off, turning the rear
system on from the rear controls will also turn on the
front system on.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 – Rear Blower
2 – Rear Climate Control Icon
3 – Rear Temperature
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
327
Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the Rear Temperature Control
second row seat occupants have control of the rear Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the
second row seat occupants have control of the rear mode
blower speed.
control knob.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds. To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Mode Control
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
328
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
Floor Mode
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
Air comes from the floor outlets.
DEFROST mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
Window Fogging
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
Operating Tips
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Summer Operation
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature trailer
tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance
may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from
overheating during the high load condition.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
329
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
obstructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
330
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 343
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 343
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
䡵 All-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Single-Speed Operating Instructions/
Precautions (3.6L Engine) – If Equipped . . . . 350
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 341
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
332
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) (5.7L Engine) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ When To Use Low Range – If Equipped . . . . 358
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
(If Equipped) — 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . 365
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
333
▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ ESC Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC
Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
䡵 Tire Safety Information
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 391
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 390
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 398
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
334
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 399
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ 3.6L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
▫ 5.7L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . .
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 411
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
. . . . 414
. . . . 414
. . . . 416
. . . . 416
. . . . 417
. . . . 417
. . . . 417
. . . . 418
. . . . 418
. . . . 418
. . . . 418
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 421
335
䡵 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Towing This Vehicle
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive
Models (Single-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . 440
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
▫ Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive
Models (Two-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
336
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
before shifting into any driving gear.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
337
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing The Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
Removing The Button
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
button loose.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
338
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK START/STOP Button
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
accelerator pedal.
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressbutton is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
PARK position, or it could roll.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
339
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
OFF position.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
and START. To change the ignition switch positions
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C)
follow these steps.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
340
STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using Fob With Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
341
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor The engine block heater cord is located:
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
• 3.6L Engine – coiled and strapped to the engine oil
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
dipstick tube.
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
• 5.7L Engine – bundled and fastened to the injector
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
harness.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the coolant.
WARNING!
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the heater cord to
a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
342
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. Once
the key fob is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
343
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or
START position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
Shift Lever
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
Gear Ranges
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
hundred miles/kilometers.
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
344
STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to
the LOCK position first.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever into the PARK position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be
(Continued) started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
345
shifts the transmission into ERS 3 (third gear), the transmission will never shift above third gear, but can shift
down to 2 (second) or 1 (first), when needed.
NOTE:
• If you pull and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the left
(-), the transmission will downshift to the lowest gear
DRIVE
that can be attained without overrevving the engine.
This range should be selected only when the vehicle is at
The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and
a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied. The
will limit the top gear to the one displayed.
transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear.
• If you push and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the
The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characright (+), the transmission will exit the gear limiting
teristics under all normal operating conditions.
mode and shift to the appropriate gear. The display
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
will read ⬙D⬙.
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
3.6L Engine
you to move the shift lever left (-) or right (+) when the
When in the DRIVE position, the first tap to the left (-)
shift lever is in the DRIVE position, allowing you to limit
will shift down one gear and will display that gear. For
the highest available gear. For example, if the driver
example, if you are in DRIVE and are in fifth gear, when
you tap the shift lever one time to the left (-), the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
346
STARTING AND OPERATING
transmission will downshift to fourth gear and the dis- gear). When in the DRIVE position in fifth gear, the first
play will show 4. Another tap to the left (-) will shift the tap to the left (-) will downshift the transmission and
display 5 (ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear).
transmission into third gear.
Another tap to the left (-) will shift the transmission
5.7L Engine
down to ERS 4 (direct gear).
On vehicles equipped with the 5.7L engine, use of ERS (or
TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additional underWARNING!
drive gear which is not normally used during throughgear accelerations. This additional gear improves vehicle Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
on certain grades. ERS 1, 2, and 3 are underdrive gears; grip and the vehicle could skid.
ERS 4 is direct drive. ERS 5 (Overdrive) is the same as the
1
2
3
4 5* D
normal 4th gear. When in the DRIVE position in first Screen Display
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5
through fourth gear, the first tap to the left (-) will display Actual Gear(s) Allowed
the ERS designation for the current gear (the transmis- * Applies to vehicles equipped with 5.7L engines only.
sion will not downshift). For example, if you are in
DRIVE and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap the NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
shift lever one time to the left (-), the display will show 4 deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the
(ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap to the left (-) will shift left “D(-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift to
the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear for 3.6L engine, fourth
and fifth gears for 5.7L engine). The transmission will
automatically shift to Overdrive, if the following conditions are present:
347
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section.
During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts, depending on engine and transmission
temperature. This feature improves the warm-up time of
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temthe engine and transmission.
perature;
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
(48 km/h);
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough, the “TRANSMISSION
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
OVER TEMP” message may display, and the transmis• transmission has reached normal operating
sion may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmistemperature.
sion cools down. After cool down, the transmission will
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem- resume normal operation.
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
• the shift lever is in DRIVE;
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
348
STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive, to the
most desirable gear, if the accelerator pedal is fully
pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph
(56 km/h).
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode – If Equipped
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will
shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled
under steady cruise conditions.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine
speed and load, an upshift, followed shortly thereafter by a
downshift, may occur. The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light”
will turn off. This is a normal part of the overheat protection strategy when operating in the TOW/HAUL mode.
349
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the engine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate normally. Only second gear (3.6L engine) or third gear
(5.7L engine) will be available in the DRIVE position.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home
Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear (3.6L engine) or in direct
gear (5.7L engine) until the vehicle is brought to a stop. Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati1. Stop the vehicle.
cally, at a calibrated speed, at light throttle. It engages at
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may re3. Turn the engine off, and be sure to turn the ignition sult in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed
switch to the LOCK position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
350
STARTING AND OPERATING
drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration, • If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the
the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
NOTE:
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
• The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usucause damage to the transmission. The torque conally after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
engine.
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
This is normal. Manually shifting (using the ERS shift
control) between 4 (direct gear) and 5/D (Overdrive Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
gear) positions will demonstrate that the transmission (3.6L Engine) – If Equipped
is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. For vehicles This system contains a single-speed (HI range only)
with 5.7L engines (which have two Overdrive gears), transfer case, which provides convenient full-time allthe transmission may not shift into the top Overdrive wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
gear (normal fifth gear) until the transmission fluid Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
and engine coolant are warm.
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
351
NOTE: This system is not appropriate for conditions
where LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Off-Road
Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) (5.7L Engine) –
If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated
by the AWD Control Switch, which is located on the
center console.
5
AWD Control Switch (Three–Position)
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three
mode positions:
• All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD AUTO)
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
352
STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages (AWD
AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in the EVIC
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads.
(Electronic Vehicle Information Center) and indicate the
For variable driving conditions, the AWD AUTO mode
current and desired transfer case selection. Refer to
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Unthe vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. All-wheel
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informadrive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
tion. When you select a different transfer case position,
senses a loss of traction.
the position indicator lights will do the following:
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear 1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired 2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shift- transfer case completes the shift.
ing instructions. The LOW RANGE position is designed 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
LOW RANGE position on dry hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
353
The “SERV AWD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means
ON.
that the all-wheel drive system is not functioning prop2. The newly selected position indicator light will con- erly and that service is required.
tinue to flash.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
WARNING!
3. The transfer case will not shift.
Always engage the parking brake when powering
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD Warning Light”
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
injury.
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
354
STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of the
AWD AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
AWD AUTO
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range - This range sends power to
the rear wheels. The all–wheel drive system will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
LOW RANGE
All-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
355
position will remain ON, and the newly selected
position indicator light will continue to flash until all
the requirements for the selected position have been
met. To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
original position, make certain all shift requirements
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
N
position have been met, the current position indicator
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
information.
ON.
Shifting Procedure
AWD AUTO⇔LOW RANGE
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case NOTE: When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some
position have not been met, the transfer case will not gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
356
STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission into
the following procedures:
NEUTRAL.
Preferred Procedure
3. Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position.
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE: If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
3. While still rolling, rotate the AWD control switch to
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
the desired position.
in process, the desired position indicator light will flash
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not continuously while the original position indicator light is
ON, until all requirements have been met.
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
357
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, engine off.
2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.
3. Place the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen,
etc.) for four seconds until the LED light by the switch
starts to blink indicating shift in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift is
complete.
5
Neutral Switch
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
358
STARTING AND OPERATING
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use LOW Range – If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. LOW range.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
Driving Through Water
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactowater, there are a number of precautions that must be
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
considered before entering the water.
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
359
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The
flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in
Driving through water more than a few inches/
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to Maintenance
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contamito minimize wave effects.
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
Flowing Water
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to preIf the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
vent component damage.
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
360
STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary. Refer
to “All-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear
than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-revving
the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW. Use first
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
gear and LOW for very steep hills.
drive straight up or down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
361
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
case into LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the
required.
hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and susspeed and direction.
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
values specified in the Service Manual.
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis- • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
sion whenever possible.
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
After Driving Off-Road
propeller shafts.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
362
STARTING AND OPERATING
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or POWER STEERING
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
3.6L Engine
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
and cleaned as soon as possible.
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
WARNING!
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause while parking and good feel while driving. If the electroexcessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
not have full braking power when you need it to prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your system will provide mechanical steering capability.
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
CAUTION!
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
363
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM” NOTE:
message and a flashing icon are displayed on • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
and during parking maneuvers.
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it
5.7L Engine
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have
The standard power steering system will give you good
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
the power steering system. You will lose power steering
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
assistance momentarily until the over temperature consteering capability if power assist is lost.
dition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe,
then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condiInformation (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
Panel” for further information.
parking maneuvers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
364
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
Power Steering Fluid Check
does not in any way damage the steering system.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
WARNING!
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
Continued operation with reduced power steering apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authoassist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
rized dealer.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
365
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS)
(IF EQUIPPED) — 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
WARNING!
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
CAUTION!
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
366
STARTING AND OPERATING
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
Parking Brake
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
367
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
368
STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake Lock Differential
(BLD), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for more information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
369
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
370
STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift
will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
371
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match conditions.
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approWARNING!
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent col• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
lisions, including those resulting from excessive
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the safety or the safety of others.
TCS is active. If the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light”
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the The ESC system has two available operating modes in
AWD AUTO range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and
one operating mode in AWD LOW range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
372
STARTING AND OPERATING
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand,
or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC
would normally allow is required to gain traction. To
On
turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF”
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
AUTO range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever
operation.
the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from AWD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
AWD AUTO range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
AUTO Range (All-Wheel Drive Models) Or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other
stability features of ESC function normally. This mode is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
ESC OFF Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
AWD Low Range (LOW)
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD LOW
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in AWD LOW
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
AWD AUTO range or NEUTRAL to AWD LOW range,
the ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
373
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
374
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
375
WARNING!
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
376
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in
PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll
down the hill and could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. Always remember to use
the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that
the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the slow or fast mode, it does
not function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
the driver should not notice it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF
Indicator Light
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
377
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the
instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is
active. If the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESC
OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time
the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
378
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
379
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designastandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
380
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
381
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
382
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
383
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
384
STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
385
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five NOTE:
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
[295 kg]).
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
calculated in Step 4.
(392 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
386
STARTING AND OPERATING
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
387
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
388
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
389
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
CAUTION!
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage it.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been outside temperature condition.
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
390
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
Radial-Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
WARNING!
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
391
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in with one of the following types of non-matching tempothe tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
CAUTION!
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipYou can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempocompact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
392
STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
393
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
394
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
to help you in determining when your tires should be grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
replaced.
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
395
Life Of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon various The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
factors including but not limited to:
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
• Distance driven
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
WARNING!
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Information section of this manual for more information
You could lose control and have an collision resulting relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
in serious injury or death.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
those of the original wheels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
396
STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, use SAE class “S” low profile
cables or traction devices only. Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 #SZ 441 cables or equivalent are
recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
397
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
398
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and different loads and perform different steering, handling,
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the unequal rates.
safety and handling of your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
399
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
Tire Rotation
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
recommended cold tire pressure.
shown in the following diagram.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
400
STARTING AND OPERATING
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires have been
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
401
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
(Continued)
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
402
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.”
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires, and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
the tire.
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
Base System
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate, a warning mesreadings to the Receiver Module.
sage to appear, or the chime to sound.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “TIRE LOW
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument cluster for a minimum of five seconds, and an
audible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur,
you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish,
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
403
five seconds when a system fault is detected, and a chime
will sound. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur by any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. In addition, a “SERVICE TPM 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
SYSTEM” message will be displayed for a minimum of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
404
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
to be ON, a “TIRE LOW PRESSURE” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of
five seconds, and a chime to sound. Driving the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” as long as none of the road tires are below the
low pressure warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire, in place of a road tire, that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, a “TIRE LOW PRESSURE” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of
five seconds, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn ON. After driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be
displayed for a minimum of five seconds. For each
subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed
for a minimum of five seconds, and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. Once you repair
or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
405
automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
tale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages
following components:
(Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for a
• Receiver Module
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
406
STARTING AND OPERATING
minimum of five seconds, and a graphic display of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
407
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
Light” will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
408
STARTING AND OPERATING
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as long as none of
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
road tires are below the low pressure warning threshpressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
old.
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
will sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
to be ON, a chime to sound, a “TIRE LOW PRESthe “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
SURE” message to appear in the EVIC, and the
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
graphic display will still show the low tire pressure
addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
value “flashing.” Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minSYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
409
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
410
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine – If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
5.7L Engine – If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for
optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
411
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
412
STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• poor engine performance
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold driveability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• change the engine oil and oil filter
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• disconnect and reconnect the battery
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
413
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
(Continued) NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
414
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
(Continued)
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
415
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
5
E-85 Fuel Cap
E-85 Badge
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
416
STARTING AND OPERATING
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
15% unleaded gasoline.
than 1/4 full
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with • When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
you may experience hard starting and rough idle
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
following start up even if the above recommendations
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
are followed.
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
417
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
418
STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
Maintenance
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
CAUTION!
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol comDo not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
patible parts.
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
419
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under 2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
the headlamp switch).
cap.
5
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Cap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
420
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
421
• Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
5
1. Open the liftgate.
Release Cable
2. Remove the left rear storage bin.
3. Pull the release cable.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
422
STARTING AND OPERATING
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry, including
the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, cargo.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability, does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
423
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
capacity of this tire size.
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
Rim Size
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exInflation Pressure
ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
424
STARTING AND OPERATING
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect and recommendations in this manual concerning veon the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way hicles used for trailer towing.
the brakes operate.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
CAUTION!
you in understanding the following information.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
425
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
426
STARTING AND OPERATING
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- Weight-Carrying Hitch
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
information.
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
WARNING!
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumIt is important that you do not exceed the maximum
sized trailers.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% When used in accordance with the manufacturers’ direcor more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
Frontal Area
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crossThe frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
winds, and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
427
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weightdistributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier trailer tongue weights (TW) and may be required
depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration/loading
to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, and braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
428
STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing
Hitch (Incorrect)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) with the
optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized
dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
429
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
430
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Model Model
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
620 lbs (281 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
720 lbs (326 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
3.6L
4x2
11,600 lbs (5 262 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
3.6L
4x4
11,600 lbs (5 262 kg)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
5.7L
4x2
13,100 lbs (5 942 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
5.7L
4x4
13,100 lbs (5 942 kg)
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The addition of passengers
and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo
(to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lbs
(1 769 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
431
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or more,
it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing hitch to
ensure stable handling of your vehicle.
NOTE: Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow
package are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs tongue weight).
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels, or heavier in the
rear, can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Consider the following items when computing the
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
many trailer collisions.
• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
432
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and
Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
CAUTION! (Continued)
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
433
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
434
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres− An electronically-actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge-actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
brake controller is not required.
inspection procedure.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg), and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
435
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package includes both a seven-pin and a
four-pin connector at the rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
436
STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING
437
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if
you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a lower gear range,
should be selected.
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level before towing
(5.7L engine).
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped) or − When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
selecting a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range
you can get back to cruising speed.
Select (ERS) feature) while operating the vehicle under
heavy operating conditions, will improve performance
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shiftmaximize fuel efficiency.
ing and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
438
STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
SNOW PLOW
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
heating, take the following actions:
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
− City Driving
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectWhen stopped for short periods of time, shift the transedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
439
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
440
STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towRecreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Shift the transmission
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
into PARK.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
ground.
5. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
441
CAUTION! (Continued)
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case)
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing.
(Continued)
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be placed in the PARK
position for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
442
STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Shift the transmission into PARK.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, remove the
Keyless Enter-N-Go button and use the key fob to
complete this procedure. Refer to “Starting Procedures/
Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
443
8. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL button.
7. Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button
(located by the selector switch). The NEUTRAL indicator 9. Start the engine.
light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
12. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with transmission in DRIVE.
13. Turn OFF the engine.
14. Firmly apply the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into PARK.
NEUTRAL Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
444
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer
case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is OFF
prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
16. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
17. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
18. Release the parking brake.
during the shift, the NEUTRAL indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that
shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it conprior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
nected to the tow vehicle.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
445
3. Insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn it to
the ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button
(located by the selector switch) until the NEUTRAL
indicator light turns off.
5
NEUTRAL Switch
7. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.
8. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
446
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL, NOTE:
turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear • Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button
clash.
and must continue to be met until the shift has been
9. Shift transmission into PARK.
completed. If any of these requirements are not met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, or are no
10. Release the brake pedal.
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL indicator
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
light will flash continuously until all requirements are
met or until the NEUTRAL button is released.
12. Start the engine.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a transfer case shift to take place and for the
14. Release the parking brake.
position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
15. Shift the transmission into gear, and check that the
not take place and no position indicator lights will be
vehicle operates normally.
on or flashing.
16. The Keyless Enter-N-Go button (if equipped) may
now be reinstalled if desired. Refer to “Starting • A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
Procedures/Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 467
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key FOB . . . . . 471
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
▫ All-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
448
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
449
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
6
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
450
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Jack Storage Location
Rotate the thumb screw on the jack to loosen the assembly and remove the jack from the bracket.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
451
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
6
Thumb Screw Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Spare Tire Location
452
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the lug wrench handle and extension to completely lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the winch
stops.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
vertically behind the rear bumper.
453
5. Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull
the metal stamping toward you to release it from the
plastic plate.
6
Spare Tire
Tab Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
454
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube 7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the
and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and push it protective plate from the steel spare wheel.
through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
Releasing Protective Plate
Sleeve And Cable
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
455
3. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, away from
traffic.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
2. Place the transmission in PARK, set the parking brake
and activate the Hazard Warning flashers.
6
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
456
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
457
1. Loosen the lug nuts on the road wheel one turn, but do 3. For the front axle, place the jack and protective cap on
not remove.
the body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do
2. Assemble the cover on top of the jack and attach the
not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
lug wrench to the jack tool with the hook.
engaged.
6
Jack And Tool Assembly
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
458
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Front Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
4. For a rear tire, place the jack and protective cap on the
flange rearward of the hoist/rear tie-down bracket, just
forward of the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular lift
point symbol on the sill molding). Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
459
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts.
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
460
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct
wheel nut tightness is 110 ft lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
10. Remove the small center cap and position the aluminum road wheel behind rear bumper with the “beauty
side” facing rearward.
“Beauty Side”
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective
plate in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the end of
the winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and stamped cone
shape wheel plate though the road wheel and protective
plate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
461
6
Installing Winch
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protec- NOTE: Double check to ensure the tire is snug against
tive plate until it is directly under the winch and between the underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
the rear bumper and exhaust system heat shields. Raise may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
the tire by turn the lug wrench on the winch extension
clockwise until it clicks/ratchets three times to make sure
the cable is tight.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
462
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact-type tools may damage the winch mechanism.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the flap
on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools in the
bag underneath the others. Use the Velcro straps to
secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug wrench on the
forward side of the jack. Expand the jack on the bracket
by turning the thumb screw clockwise until it is tight to
prevent rattles.
14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack in
the rear storage bin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Jack And Tool Kit
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
463
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Jack And Tool Kit Properly Stored
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire, jack NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
and tool kit.
precautions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
464
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
465
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
466
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
467
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in- EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
spected at your authorized dealer.
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
468
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. If the engine is running, press the START/STOP
button to turn it off. Do not start the engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
3. Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder (located
next to the shifter on the center console).
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully remove
the shift lever override access cover, located on the
bottom of the cupholder.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
469
7. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and
rubber liner.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, reach into the
opening and press and hold the shift lever override
down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
470
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF
the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
RWD MODELS
AWD MODELS
If transmission is operable:
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Trans in NEUTRAL
• Trans in PARK
• 30 mph max(48 km/h)
• T/case in NEUTRAL
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance • Tow in forward direction
NO
OK
NO
BEST METHOD
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged refer to “Shift Lever
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the
PARK position for towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position,
not in the LOCK position.
Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
471
Rear-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
472
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed will
15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the all four wheels OFF the ground.
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
CAUTION!
flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift
or towing dolly.
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
All-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
when towing.
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and • Failure to follow these towing methods could
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
result in damage to the transmission and/or transfer case. Such damage is not covered by the New
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
case is operable, the vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 477
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
474
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
▫ Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 519
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 511
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . 522
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 525
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
475
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
476
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
477
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
soon as possible.
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
478
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
479
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the REPLACEMENT PARTS
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
you may need to do nothing more than drive your warranty.
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
480
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
481
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart
(0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE
range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE
range.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
482
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
been certified by the American
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
manufacturer only recommends
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
API Certified engine oils.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
483
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS).
Refer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number, should not be used.
ber, should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating Synthetic Engine Oils
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
quality requirements are met, and the recommended
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
484
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added To Engine Oils
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high-quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high-quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Air Cleaner Filter
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
environment. Contact your local authorized dealer, ser- maintenance intervals.
vice station, or governmental agency for advice on how
and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded
in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every oil change.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
485
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
7
486
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt condition should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
487
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
488
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt
or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
489
Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the
windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
490
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
blade holder.
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
491
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
492
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
493
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
494
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
495
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than
the specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze),
may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
496
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentracoolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
(-37°C) are anticipated.
to 5 Years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replace• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
period, it is important that you use the same engine
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
engine cooling system.
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main(antifreeze).
tain the proper level of protection against freezing acWhen adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威 the vehicle is operated.
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5–Year/100,000 Mile Formula
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
equivalent.
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
497
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
WARNING!
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
• The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by anicooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. mals and children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To any ground spills immediately.
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
498
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
no need to remove the radiator cap, unless checking for
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing enevidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
a month.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
freezing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
499
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be periodically inspected.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
WARNING!
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
500
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
501
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
(Continued) The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
502
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then
and cause them to leak.
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill Transfer Case
hole.
Fluid Level Check
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum found, the transfer case fluid level can be checked by
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be removing the filler plug located on the back side of the
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with transfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edge
of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level
cast iron housings.
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
503
Adding Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
Selection Of Lubricant
when the vehicle is in a level position.
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perforDrain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom- mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be mainCAUTION!
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
504
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check – 3.6L Engine
Regular fluid level checks are not required. For this
reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or
Special Additives
malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission fluid level.
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
505
Fluid Level Check – 5.7L Engine
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature. This occurs after at least 15 miles
(25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
To check the fluid level properly, the following procedure
must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position
ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
506
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the dipstick again, and note the fluid level on
CAUTION!
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat- Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
ing temperature. The fluid level is only valid if there is a (10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. If the
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Do produce an accurate reading.
not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the
oil fill tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to 7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
fluid level.
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem- dipstick tube.
perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geonormal operating temperature.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
507
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on Washing
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vecorrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains, and to
The most common causes are:
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
paint.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
508
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized
clear and open.
dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Special Care
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
509
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or select a
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
soap residue.
MOPAR威 cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do
not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
the wheels’ protective finish.
Interior Care
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
If Equipped
upholstery and carpeting.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manInterior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
ner:
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equiva• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent,
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
510
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
Leather Seat Care And Cleaning
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
511
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
cloth.
directly on the mirror.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
buckles do not work properly.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care FUSES
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Totally Integrated Power Module
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive engine compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
512
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover
that corresponds to the following chart.
Totally Integrated Power Module
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J01
40 Amp
Green
J02
30 Amp
Pink
J03
30 Amp
Pink
J04
25 Amp
Natural
J05
25 Amp
Natural
J06
40 Amp
Green
J07
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
Description
Air Suspension
Power Liftgate Module
Trailer Tow
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability Control System
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability Control System
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J08
40 Amp
Green
J09
30 Amp
Pink
J10
30 Amp
Pink
J11
30 Amp
Pink
J12
30 Amp
Pink
J13
60 Amp
Yellow
J14
20 Amp
Blue
J15
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J17
40 Amp
Green
J18
20 Amp
Blue
Power Seat
E-Brake
Headlamp Wash Relay Contact
Drive Train Control
Module
Rear Defroster
Main Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
Trailer Tow Lamps/
Park Lamps
Front Cabin Fan/
Blower
J19
60 Amp
Yellow
J20
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
J21
J22
M1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Mini
Fuse
513
Description
Starter Motor Solenoid
Powertrain Control
Module/Powertrain
Control Module
Transmission Range
Radiator Fan Motor
HI/Radiator Fan Motor Low
Front Wiper
Front/Rear Washer
Control
Sunroof Module
15 Amp
Blue
Stop Lamp
7
514
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M2
M3
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Electronic Limit Slip
Differential/Air Suspension
Liftgate Unlock/DRL
Relay
115V AC Power Inverter
Rain Sensor/Cigar
Lighter
Power Outlet #2
(Switchable)
Front Heated Seat &
Steering Wheel
Rear Heated Seats
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
Video/Universal Garage Door Opener
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Heating, Ventilation &
Air Conditioning (Climate Control System)
Radio/Amplifier
Instrument Cluster
Back Up Camera
Power Seat
Module(s)/Adaptive
Cruise Control/Audio
Telematics/Daytime
Running Lights
Relay/Air Suspension
Module/Instrument
Cluster
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M16
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Automatic Shutdown
1 and 2
Instrument Cluster
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M26
M27
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Automatic Shutdown
3
Horns (Low/High) –
Right
Horns (Low/High) –
Left
Rear Wiper
M28
15 Amp
Blue
M29
Fuel Pump Motor
Output/Diesel Lift
Pump (Export Only)
M31
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
M30
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
515
Description
Driver Door Switch
Bank
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Control
Module/Keyless Entry Module
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission Controller
Tire Pressure Monitor
J1962 Diag Connector
Backup Lamps
7
516
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission Controller
Park Assist Module/
Climate Control System Module/IR
Sensor/Compass
Module
LH Rear Parklamps
Power Outlet
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
M37
M38
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control System Module/
Stoplamp Switch
Sensor
All Door Lock &Unlock
CAUTION!
• When installing the totally integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the totally
integrated power module and possibly result in a
electrical system failure.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
517
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Grab Handle Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2
• Remove fuse #27 in the Totally Integrated Power
Visor Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Telltale/Hazard Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
518
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge
(HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . Service at Authorized Dealer (**)
Headlamp (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
Headlamp (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7444NA
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Liftgate Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED (*)
* CHMSL is not serviceable. It is a LED lamp. To replace
the LED, the entire CHMSL assembly must be replaced.
** The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge
tube. High voltage can maintain in the circuit even with
the headlamp switch off and the key fob removed.
Because of this, you should not attempt to service a
headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
519
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
Front Turn Signal
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 1. Open the hood.
10 seconds, as the system charges.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterHalogen Headlamps – If Equipped
clockwise to remove from housing.
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
520
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connector.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
521
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with 3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
522
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from 5. Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening.
lamp.
6. Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
8. Continue removing the trim.
lamp assembly.
9. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
10. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
1. Raise the liftgate.
clockwise.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
11. Remove/replace bulb(s).
lower trim from the liftgate.
12. Reinstall the socket(s)
3. Once lower trim is loose, close the liftgate.
13. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
4. Open the flipper glass.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
523
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear License Lamp
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
snap tab to remove the license lamp lens.
2. Pull bulb from socket.
3. Replace bulb.
4. Reinstall lens.
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
524
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer
Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer
Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
U.S.
Metric
25 Gallons
94.6 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
10.4 Quarts
9.9 Liters
15.4 Quarts
14.6 Liters
16 Quarts
15.2 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
525
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
LZFR5C–11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
526
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir – 3.6L
Engine
Power Steering Reservoir – 5.7L
Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353 or equivalent.
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) or
equivalent with friction modifier additive.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent.
MOPAR威 Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS-11655, such as Fuchs
EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 529
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
528
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be discomes first.
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
529 M
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
master cylinder, power steering and transmission
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in(5.7L only) and add as needed.
formation.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a At Each Oil Change
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
• Change the engine oil filter.
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or Required Maintenance Intervals
damage.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals pages for the required maintenance intervals.
as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 530 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
N
T 6 Months Maintenance Service
E Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
531 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 532 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
N
T 30 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
533 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 534 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
N
T 54 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km)
whichever comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
535 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
8
Date
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M 536 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
N ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
C ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
E ❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
537 M
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 538 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
A
N ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
C ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
E ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
539 M
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 540 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
A
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
C
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏
❏
❏
❏
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
541 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 545
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 546
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 546
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
544
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
545
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
546
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
547
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
548
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
549
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
550
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
551
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
552
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
554
INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . 166
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 484
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,77
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,76,81,98,250
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,74,76,77
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 72,74,77
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,250
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 319
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,503
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504,505
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
555
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
504
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
349
345 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
216 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 95
216 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517,518
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 27 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,98 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,414
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet)
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .
....
....
....
...
....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
556
INDEX
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,319
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,478
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,83,88,90
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,88
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,294
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 308
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 497
. . . . . . . . . . 495
. . . . . . . . . . 494
. . . . . . . . . . 498
. . . . . . . . . . 497
. . . . . . . . . . 497
. . . . . . . 495,524
. . . . . . . . . . 166
. . . . . . . . . . 222
. . . . . . . . . . 545
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,324
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
557
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Used Engine Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 268
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 315
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
558
INDEX
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 216 Engine
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475,476
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . 475,476
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,97,414
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . 163,166
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410,524
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,254
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Multi-Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481,524
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 478
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482,524
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
559
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,248,519,521
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414,416
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 503,504,505
Filters
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 78
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,97,414
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,491
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
560
INDEX
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 525
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,520
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 188,261,281
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,421
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Saver Mode . .
Tank Capacity .
Fuel Optimizer . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution
Fuel, Flexible . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
268
524
268
268
420
414
511
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,421,477
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,29,186,409
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,425
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,425
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™)
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
119
448
518
519
510
248
147
519
110
341
249
Hill Start Assist . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing .
Holder, Cup . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage
Hood Release . . . .
561
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
...................
...................
Door Opener) Transmitter
...................
...
...
..
...
429
222
206
144
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,16
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,83
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,244
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
562
INDEX
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,455
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,271,337
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,271
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 86,88
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,146
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,76,81,98,250
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
563
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . 262
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Service Engine Soon
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 377
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,520
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 244
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,146,519,521
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518,519
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 245
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152,204
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
564
INDEX
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,88
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479,548
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
. . . . . 485
. . . . . 480
. . . . . 528
. . 245,478
. . . . . 549
. . . . . 140
. . . . . 140
. . . . . 140
. . . . . 411
. . . . . 269 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
. . . . . 107
. . . . . 108 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,74,78
. . . . . 109 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 71,72,74,77
. . . . . 109
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482,524
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483,524
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477,478
565
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,448
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 6,549
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
566
INDEX
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 383
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 216
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,122
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,364
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . 160
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect™ studios)
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
390
319
315
158
326
501
202
117
222
326
193
136
229
228
INDEX
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 442
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . 444
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 316
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
567
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,97
Satellite Radio (Uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
568
INDEX
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,98
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 57
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,90
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,122
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,250
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,294
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Transfer Case, Shifting out of
Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,248,519,521
Sirius Backseat TV™ (Uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . 315
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,393,451
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 163,166
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,336
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339,341
569
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,364
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329,517
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
570
INDEX
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 67
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 319
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 252
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 383
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,387,551
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383,384
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 399
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,469
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
571
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,503
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 206
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 24
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,519,521
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
572
INDEX
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 308
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,422
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329,517
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,490
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,215
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2011 Grand Caravan
2011
Chrysler Group LLC
11WD01-126-AE
Grand Caravan
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fifth Edition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Printed in U.S.A.
291686.ps 11Y532-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 07/14/2010 08:26:13
2011 Grand Caravan
2011
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11Y532-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Caravan
Download PDF
Similar pages